JP7114562B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine capable of performing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state for a player.

In a conventional game machine, when a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) is satisfied, a specific display (suspension display or active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is displayed on the display means. For variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, there are those capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. can be considered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables a player to easily recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emitting effect.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect that differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special aspect,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium in accordance with a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing guidance display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area using image display;
a guide light emitting means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot a game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
The first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed while the start effect relating to the start of the control of the advantageous state is being executed, and in the subsequent period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance is displayed. display and
Performing the second guide display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
The guidance light emitting means emits the guidance light when executing the first guidance display after turning off the light emitting means.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light; effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is completed The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part that blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), the specific display When the display start effect B is executed, the win flash lamp 135SG009F as the win flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c are movable from the timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display. the part where the body lamp 9d emits light),
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the name display of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
The second guidance display is continued in a special state after the advantageous state control is finished.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Further, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous. Also, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, during execution of a jackpot start effect as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575, a player is urged to shoot a game ball rightward by operating a ball shooting handle. Some were configured to give instructions to hit right. However, there is still room for improvement with respect to the instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. There is a demand for providing a game machine that can be executed favorably.

The game machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the name display of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
The second guidance display is continued in a special state after the advantageous state control is finished.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display display start effect execution processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state where the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the start lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where a start winning, which is the target of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where a start winning, which is the target of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where a start winning, which is the target of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where a start winning, which is the target of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where a start winning, which is the target of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is output when the start winning is generated, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the lamp for flash at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp are turned on, and the effect image and the silhouette image are displayed. is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display and active display in a modified example, suggestive contents of each display mode, and selection ratios at the time of determining execution of flash effect at the time of winning. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characterizing part of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure LED board and a fourth symbol unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during hit variation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp|ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure during the fanfare production|presentation by special figure 1 hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during 1 round of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 1 big hit at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during two rounds of big hits at the time of one special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 2 rounds of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 3 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the 4 big hit rounds at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure between the rounds after 4 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the jackpot final round at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the ending production at the time of special figure 1 hit.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is completed The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, it is characterized by a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start effect execution process, thereby displaying an appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top. part), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to As shown in FIGS. 10-32(H) and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific display rotation display effect execution process to display a pending display or an active display. The part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), the specific display When the display start effect B is executed, the win flash lamp 135SG009F as the win flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c are movable from the timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display. The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a character A is the first display mode). After acting on the reserved memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A, it can be displayed in a specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the reserved display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D) , The part where the flash effect at the time of winning starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 10-28, FIG. 10-29 (A), FIG. 10-29(B), FIG. 10-49(A), and FIG. 10-49(B), when it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
It should be noted that the "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low luminance, but also a state in which light is not emitted.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means once controls the display means to a low visibility state, and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), FIGS. 10-49 (A) to 10-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the previous notice effect, the sound corresponding to the previous notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light effect enables the player to execute the specific light effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before the completion of display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIG. 10-28 , Figures 10-29 (A) ~ Figure 10-32 (H), Figures 10-49 (A) ~ Figure 10-50 (D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning. (If this is the case, the winning flash effect sound will start to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start flashing, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will complete.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the player can quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the win flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the hindrance to other performances caused by the light emission.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 10-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning) A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means during the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed during the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby hindering other displays and increasing the enjoyment of the game. You can prevent it from dropping.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying an effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2) during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. .

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 (2) a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emission means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the late winning flash effect process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the late winning flash effect process table, the late winning flash effect (flash at winning Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A ) ~ as shown in Fig. 10-89(n), even during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the win flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70(A) to 10-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. In the previous variable display pattern fixing period, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 10-33 (J)). , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the effect is started, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90 as modification 135SG-2, the super reach that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is variable In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 10-96 (K) to 10-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low-luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-90, during the white-out period, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at luminance C2) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emission mode does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIGS. 10-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , As shown in FIG. 10-90, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. The part that lights the lamp 135SG009F for the display with the brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 shown in FIG. 10-108 (A) , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 10-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part that continues lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 26,
Light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-119 (A) and 10-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-win effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when the game ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 10-119 as modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 10-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect in accordance with the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action production from the light emission mode and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect execution means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
The rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect changes to the light emission mode in response to the action suggestion effect and when the light emission changes in the light emission mode according to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 10-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as a modification 135SG-5, FIG. 10- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 32 is the gaming machine according to form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIGS. 10-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily recognized by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not the specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 33 is the gaming machine according to form 31 or 32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestive effect is executed in the second mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the change suggestive effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form 34 is the gaming machine according to form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIGS. 10-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed in the display pattern ε, the part where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 36 is the gaming machine according to form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has different sizes as flash effects at the time of winning). The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 37 is the gaming machine according to form 35 or 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display targeted for the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display relating to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 10-28, 10-42(a) to 10-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed before the ready-to-win effect starts. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is emitted at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 41 is the gaming machine according to form 40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the first start-up Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-8, the first start port is operated during the execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, even in a variable display in which the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in Example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is established by passing the game medium;
a specific light-emitting means (for example, a starter lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 47 is the gaming machine according to form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A part where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 48 is the gaming machine according to form 46 or 47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display, which is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the starting winning flash effect. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. A player's sense of expectation can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a flash effect at the time of winning. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the flashing periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning mouth is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning mouth is also the same etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starter lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starter) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. The stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 is a first reserved memory display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is displayed by the circular reserved display. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

10-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region 135SG005M of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this feature section 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variable jackpot B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the present characterizing portion 135SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and the "non-probability variable big win" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG is such that the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable-probability big win, the high-probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable jackpot B" or "probability variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed once, are common normal reach reach effects. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random number for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic part 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times The fluctuation pattern of losing) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous performance).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, there is a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 135SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the area for storing the flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and the number of reserved memories, and dividing it into the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the contents of the reserved memory ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 10-11(C), a storage area similar to the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the start buffer value, which is the stored value of the start buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the start buffer value is "2", the second reserve storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "big hit". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at step 135 SGS 112 when winning a prize. As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot pattern is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range at step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 judgment values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range of possible fluctuation pattern judgment random numbers MR3. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

In step 135SGS222, when the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. After the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 executes a winning flash effect execution process for executing a winning flash effect (step 135 SGS163). For executing a specific display rotation display effect (see FIGS. 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the suspended display or active display Specific display rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined as the pre-reading notice in the feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is performed. Starting lamp light emission effect execution processing (step 135SG165) for executing the starting lamp light emission effect of causing the starting lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the end , and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and setting the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 10-15 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry in which the display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the design designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the design designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display The display mode is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 10% of the time, the pending display forewarning effect is executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (the degree of expectation for a big hit), and the pending display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be lost is highest when the target is the highest (expectation for the big hit according to the display color of the pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 10-15 as the specific display display start rendering execution processing. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251). Whether or not the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether the start winning designation command reception flag is set). ) is determined (step 135SGS252). If no starting winning designation command is received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated. Also, if there is a reception of the starting winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is specified by referring to the starting winning winning command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is subject to the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (suspension display or active display) is displayed. The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display display start effect (step 135SGS259), and executes specific display display start effect execution processing. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the specific display start effect process timer (specific display display start The value of process timer for effect A or process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (current specific display display start effect being executed) is decremented by 1. process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). When the process timer for specific display start effect in execution has not timed out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect in execution. (Step 135 SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect during execution has timed out (step 135 SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the final process timer for specific display start effect times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. If the final specific display display start rendering process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display display start rendering process timer is started, and the next specific display is started. The effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for display start effect (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

As described above, in the present characterizing portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is determined based on the starting prize not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect), or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U, as the specific display start effect A, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top. be.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. The suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other suspended displays and active displays as the specific display rotation display effect described above. Transition to display with rotation animation in .

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) to 10-20(C) and FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4), as the specific display display start effect B, first, On the image display device 5, an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation is displayed that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold indication is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display display start effect B is finished. It is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. need. Then, the suspended display after the end of the specific display display start effect B is transferred to the rotation animation display in the first suspended memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, when the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start win and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the starting prize, as in FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds. The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22 are flow charts showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution processing. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display announcement effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state. (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, when the variable display result is a failure, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set in the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning of the entry (the entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds after the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) and 10-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this characteristic part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the first term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second), such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be output repeatedly. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described winning flash effect sound, a plurality of effect sounds such as a notice effect corresponding sound and a variable display corresponding sound to be described later are generated using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effect has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last period has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next early stage winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

At step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a form corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by a lamp 135SG009F for winning a flash in an image display device 5 is flashed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at winning, a sound corresponding to the flash performance at winning is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit light in white or red as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. Incidentally, since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower brightness than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 10-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIG. 10-27 (B) to FIG. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the period during execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

Further, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation at step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning after decreasing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period is started, and the process data 1 Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B, that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is a variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the symbol confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the feature part 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of winning late is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Incidentally, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), blinking control in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect The flashing control of the lamp 9 is performed in a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices that it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the determination result. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 135SG is a dialogue effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after step 135SGS366 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination command has been received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device at the time of execution of flash effect at the time of winning in this characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-28 to 10-68. First, FIG. 10-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. In addition, FIG. 10-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 10-29 to 10-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 show that a starting prize is generated during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning, while the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

10-29 to 10-48 "When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined", the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and the "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in FIGS. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production, such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-30(C), and 10-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this characteristic part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the time of winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the present characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (FIGS. 10-32 (G) and FIG. 10 -32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-32 (G), and 10-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the first-term winning flash effect and the start timing of the second-term winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission modes of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y match the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-32(H), 10-33(I), and 10-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(H) and 10-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J), 10-34 (K) and 10-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(K) to 10-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), when the variable display that is out of normal reach is completed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern and a small display. The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-40(W) and 10-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43(c) to 10-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-45(g) to 10-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-46 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-45(g) and 10-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48 (m) and 10-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the latter stage, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 ends. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emitting effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-50(C), and 10-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect for winning a prize (previous flash effect for winning a prize) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 10-19 (B-1) to Fig. 10-19 (B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 ends (Fig. 10-29 to (See Fig. 10-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started. there is

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the time of winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this characterizing portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-52 (G) and 10-52 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the first-term winning flash effect and the start timing of the second-term winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission modes of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y match the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-52(H), 10-53(I), and 10-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-52(H) and 10-53(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-53 (J), 10-54 (K) and 10-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-54(K) to 10-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at volume V2, flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ) also, as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 , the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-63(c) to 10-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-63(d) and 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-65(g) to 10-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 10-65(g) and 10-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-68 (m) and 10-68 (n), when it comes to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 ends. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, so that the player can easily recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect. . Further, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and has a brightness C2 and a cycle during the second winning flash effect execution period. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize is generated during variable display, whether or not the winning flash effect is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A with the display pattern α to display pattern γ (holding display notice After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. Along with executing the rotating display, the winning flash effects (early winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) may be executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, 10-30 (D) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is 10-15, FIGS. 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and FIGS. 10-49(B) to 10 As shown in -50 (D), it is displayed as a suspended display and a rotating animation, and as shown in FIGS. , the rotation animation of the hold display is started, so that the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), when the specific display display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of the display of the pending display, as a flash effect at the time of winning Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), even when the specific display display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the win-time flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, so the display pattern of the pending display is any one of the display patterns α to γ. Even so, since the win-time flash performance can be started before the specific display display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the win-time flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A), Figure 10-29 (B), Figure 10-49 (A), and Figure 10-49 (B), when winning based on the start winning When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once extinguished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame When the lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, the luminance is C3, which is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, and in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n) and FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether or not it is being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effect during variable display as shown in FIG. 10-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A) to Figure 10-32 (H), Figure 10-49 (A) to Figure 10-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the start winning When the execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F starts and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash at the time of winning is flashed. By blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1, so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning at the later stage, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the second winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the first prize, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Now, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, the player can easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in the interest in the game has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the other effect at the time of the winning. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning starts. During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking, that is, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command (the determination command reception flag is set) or not, or variable Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the pattern fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set according to the flash effect at the time of the winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention is exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term ends, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce discomfort when blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of ending the emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super ready to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or the active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different degrees of expectation for big hits. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect and the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamp 9 or the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 10-27 (A) to 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-69 and FIG. 10-70 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-71(C), and 10-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize (FIGS. 10-73 (G) and See FIG. 10-73 (H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-74(I) and 10-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-74 (J), 10-75 (K) and 10-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-76 (M) and 10-76 (N), during the symbol fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the latter The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the blinking of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-75(K) to 10-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the winning flash effect sound from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashing with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-79 (S) to 10-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Fig. 10-81 ( W) In this variation 135SG-1, the decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as a flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 10-81(W), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. That is, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display to which the winning flash effect is applied, the winning flash effect is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), when the variable display that is out of normal reach is completed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-84(c) to 10-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 10-84(d) and 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-86(g) to 10-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-89 (m) and 10-89 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-69, when a starting prize is generated during execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the starting prize, the start lamp light emission effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned on for the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form in which the display of the image 135SG005S is stopped is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Further, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a mode in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the effect, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 10-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as an explanation of FIG. 10-8, it was described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach effects of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach effects of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a production position (for example, a central front position in the front view of the image display device 5), and flash production at the time of winning. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the rendering position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the first display area 135SG005F is once whited out, the movable body 32 Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the motion of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the rendering position (when the movable body motion rendering is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 10-91(B), 10-92(C), and 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-93(E) to 10-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-95 (I) to 10-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90(A) and FIGS. 10-96(K) to 10-97(N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90(A), 10-98(O) and 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-99(B), 10-100(C), and 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-101(E) to 10-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-103 (I) to 10-104 (L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. 10-104 (K) to 10-105 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body action suggestive presentation ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body action presentation is completed, as shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 10-90(B), the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation at volume V1 (see FIG. 10-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B), 10-107 (Q) and 10-107 (R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the white-out are completed, the super reach in the image display device 5 At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. In addition, as the ready-to-reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach of super reach α can be used so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. Then, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in accordance with the execution of the movable body motion effect (moving the movable body 32 to the motion effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning lights up at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-108(B), 10-114(A) to 10-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the win-time flash effect is being executed. At this time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, so the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed in stages. The prize winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during execution of the prize winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the period T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a mode corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (eg, the position above the image display device 5) to the rendering position (eg, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be informed that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which one of the light emitting modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the operation performance start timing, and the ready-to-win performance is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed at a rate of 70% from the ready-to-win effect start timing. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since there is a case where the ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, the game determines whether the end timing of the winning flash effect is during the moving body action effect or during the super-ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win is different between the light emission mode and the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect or the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable object action effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (reserved display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white circle, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α. and a red circular display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the degree of expectation for the big win of the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for the big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and low for the display pattern β.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, which can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, are provided as the display patterns for the pending display and the active display. The display pattern α may also be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, the characterizing section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display notice effect (a display pattern β or a display pattern β for displaying a pending display or an active display) and the display pattern, and determines whether or not to execute a winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an effect rendering that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, as the effect effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and an effect that differs in the effect mode from the first effect effect effect A second action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the action effect is executed as the first effect effect or the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for execution in action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may act on other characters, and as a result of the action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the variable display is in progress, the first start opening wins When (start winning) occurs and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. , and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character (see FIG. 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), the When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth reserved display to the display position of the third reserved display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D In the case of moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display which is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(G) and 10-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(I) and 10-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friend character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to be displayed. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the friend character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display, the display pattern .delta. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ, the specific display display start effect A (see FIG. 10-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is executed. is displayed in the display pattern ε, the specific display display start effect B (see FIG. 10-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is specified as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form of displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with blinking of the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-124 (A) and 10-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-125(C) and 10-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this characteristic part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect for the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 10-127 (G) and 10-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at the volume V2. , Blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), flashing of game effect lamp 9 except stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (Fig. 10- 27(A) to FIG. 10-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-128(I) and 10-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-128 (J), 10-129 (K) and 10-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second variant 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-129(K) and 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 10-130 (M) and 10-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays a combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M indicating a failure. Along with the derived display (displayed with the variable display stopped), the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modified example 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case is provided in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified in a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, but in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIGS. 10-40, etc.) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a mode in which the special symbol stops in the "medium" decoration symbol display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modified example 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize from being lowered due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp includes blue light emission with luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light in the win-time flash effect, and the start-up lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start-up lamp emission effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the flash effect at the time of winning may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set when the starting winning occurs. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this manner, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when executing the winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state with lower visibility than the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased so that the display on the image display device 5 is relatively displayed. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the win-win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the latter stage, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is used for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 is temporarily executed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), and the holding display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It is executable, and the change in the lighting mode as the winning flash effect differs according to the lamp (characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving body operation before reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 10-90 to 10-107), step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and when step-up effect is executed when winning flash effect is not executed, winning flash effect While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 10-108 to 10-118) that does not change from the light emission mode according to the response, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for the flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether it changes to the light emitting mode (variant 135SG-4, FIGS. 10-119), and the display pattern α to the display pattern ε are provided as the display modes of the pending display and the active display. Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 10- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern (Modification 135SG-6, FIGS. 10-121 to 10-123), silhouette image displayed on the image display device 5 according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG005S in which the display mode changes (modification 135SG-7, FIGS. 10-124 to 10-130), etc. are disclosed, but the pachinko machine of the present invention has these plural characteristic parts and modifications Any combination of two or more features or variations from the examples may be implemented.

Further, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The game machine of the present invention also includes a game machine (for example, a , a pachinko game machine 1), which can emit light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a win-time flash lamp 135SG009F), and a specific lamp corresponding to variable display Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying displays (e.g., pending display and active display), and displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., occurrence of start-up winning). Execution of a specific display effect (for example, a portion where a pending display or an active display is displayed in any of the display patterns α to γ) and a specific light emission effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a winning flash effect). possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the effect execution means is configured so that the light emission of the light emitting means is emitted from the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect. Execute the specific light emission effect so as to be recognizable (for example, FIGS. 10-28, FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on before the display of the pending display is completed), and when the specific light emission effect is executed rather than when the specific light emission effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, the winning game state is controlled to the jackpot game state more than when the winning flash effect is not executed.) high ratio), the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b , an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means emits light during a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, when the first winning flash effect is started). to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize), and a second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, after the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is started). Variable display for flash effect when winning period until the ready-to-win effect start timing) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. During the second period, the second light emitting means blinks with the brightness C1 and the cycle T1, and blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 during the period of executing the flash effect at the time of the late winning). and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c , the movable body lamp 9d blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term); The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), the specific display When the start effect B is executed, the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash as a winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. a portion where the lamp 9d emits light), a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to an operation by a player, and a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Guidance display means for performing a guide display for urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path using image display, wherein the guide display includes the first guide display and the second guide display. 2 guidance display, wherein the guidance display means is a part of a start effect for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and the predetermined period of time. In the period after , the gaming machine continues the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state ends mentioned.

According to such a configuration, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and at the same time, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In one period, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is . . Further, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous. Also, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

That is, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect by the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a predetermined display after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. During the period, the first guide display and the second guide display emphasize the instruction to shoot the game ball in the predetermined direction, and after that, the second guide display is taken over without taking over the first guide display, and the game ball is shot in the predetermined direction. By instructing to shoot the game ball, it is possible not to overemphasize the instruction so as not to make the player feel annoyed, and to instruct the game ball to be shot in a predetermined direction modestly by performing the second guide display first. After that, the name of the advantageous state is recognized, and after recognition, the first guide display can be used to firmly instruct the game ball to be shot in a predetermined direction. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for a player when it is installed in a game hall, and that it is easy for the player to understand the instruction of the direction in which the game ball should be shot in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, the game machine can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and can suitably execute an instruction prompting the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. As an example of the form, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, wherein a game medium is placed in the game area according to the player's operation. and a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area. guidance display means for performing a guidance display for prompting the player to perform the guidance display, wherein the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display; During a predetermined period after the display result is obtained, the second guide display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for informing the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, and the advantageous state is displayed. After the state name display is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued. A game machine continues to display the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends. Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

<Description on Characteristic Portion 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-60.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11-4). (usually called a large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is placed in the space between the game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large prize winning opening door is provided, and the large winning opening door slides horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the path to the normal large winning opening for the game balls. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (passing) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 11-4). V large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning entrance door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning entrance door is located on the far side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (passing) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 11-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V big prize opening. . By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps on a game board 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, an attacker upper lamp 075F009U, a left lower lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a A board left lamp 075F009E is provided.

The movable body lamp 9d lights or flashes a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or an operating state. "XXX") is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light near the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light near the lower left corner of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a character-like housing, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the character-like housing on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a character-like housing, like the board right lamp 075F009F. Also, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), like the movable body lamp 9d.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps in a game machine frame 3. - 特許庁Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a frame lamp including a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. Prepare.

Here, FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame left lamp 075F009L lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to cause the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to cause the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 11-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 that indicates the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable that indicates the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, special figure 2 memory display part showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game 075F024, a normal pattern storage display unit 075F025 indicating the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 075F026 indicating variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 075F030 prompting the player to hit to the right, and a variable state A variable probability display portion 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of, a time saving display portion 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of the time saving state, and a round display portion 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED in the hitting to the right display section 075F030. In the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 lights (lights up), and when not prompting the player to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hitting display section 075F030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120, and the right-handed display part 075F030 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 075F030.

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow-down path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into. In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during this time, the right hitting display section 075F030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is displayed, thereby causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display urging him to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the second pending storage number, Special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 indicating the status or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation of the variable display of the second special figure or It has a special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 showing the display result and a right hitting display portion 075F055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means. Below, it is also called the variable display of the 1st special design to represent the variation of the stop design of the 1st special design by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 is extinguished. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control lights the right-handed display part 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F055 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right-handed display portion 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 11-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. Each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played. Also called effect lamp 9 .

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display portion under the control of the control CPU 120. FIG.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
11-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays a first reserved memory display area 075F005D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved indications of the circle. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first reserved memory number, and a display of the second reserved memory number. is doing.

At the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged, and the variable display of the decorative patterns can be executed. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the decoration pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. In the part, it is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 to 11-8.

(jackpot type)
FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 11-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the big win, there is a big win probability after the big win game state ends, a base after the big win game state ends, and a fluctuation time after the big win game state ends. , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes V difficult to win (for example, the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning opening is shorter than a predetermined time, or the lid The game ball is not allowed to enter a specific area by repeating the opening and closing of the box, etc.), and after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed, the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state. In the normal jackpot, either the condition that such a low probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is established. continue until

The 5R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high-probability state and a high-base state after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 10R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state is completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have common decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot have common fanfare effects (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs. The performance mode of the round performance (for example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as far as the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare effects, and round effects are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (4R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the variable probability jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also called chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round) in the same manner as the 5R probability variable jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the fanfare production mode (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) and the round production that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state is different from the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the 10R variable probability big win occurs, the player can recognize that the variable probability big win has occurred. Such a 10R probability variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 11-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for judging whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then updated from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the jackpot type to one of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for variation pattern type determination) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal design. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which of a plurality of types of jackpots such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 10R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot gaming state is selected based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot pattern may also be determined based on the random 1 value.

Also, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4) is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Also, if it is a loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection rate of the variation pattern type is different between when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state, compared to when it is not in the time saving state Therefore, the percentage of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is set high). Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the reserved memory number of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of reserved number reduction control for shortening the variable display time compared to when the reserved memory number of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it For example, in the hold number reduction control state, compared to when it is not in the hold number reduction control state, it is set so that the rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as a normal fluctuation pattern type is higher , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened compared to when the number of holds reduction control state is not in effect. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even if the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not performed.

Also, the variation pattern may be a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery instead of the two-stage determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101 .

FIG. 11-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of FIG. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (called the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variable jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variable jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the game is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). ), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big win or a variable probability big win) with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-8(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 11-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 11-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , and "10R probability variable jackpot" are set with corresponding jackpot determination values. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8(C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a decision value (jackpot pattern determination value) for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "1". The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 are such that the lighting means such as LED lights or blinks in a lighting mode corresponding to each big hit pattern, so that the stopped jackpot pattern can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LED in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot pattern can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the ratio of selecting "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than the jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol for the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the player The ratio of selecting the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player is high.

(Production control command)
FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, two bytes, the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In the following description, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variable jackpot is determined. Each of the losing designation command, the 5R normal jackpot designation command, the 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and the 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, and a jackpot start 3 designation command, or these commands are also collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there will be a big hit at the time of start-up winning, and determines the range of determination values of the type of the big win and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 11-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is provided with a first pending storage buffer (storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the first special symbol) or a second pending storage buffer (second special It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N at step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (step 075FS002). When the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step 075FS002), the processing for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

According to the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 11-8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers on the right side of FIG. 11-8 (A) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values There is provided a normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values on the left side of FIG. 11-8(A) are set) which is set smaller than the time jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 11-8(A). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the probability variable flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

In step 075FS011, if the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the big-hit determination values, the CPU 103 sets a big-hit flag indicating a big hit (step 075FS012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of the plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 11-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging the type of jackpot extracted in the starting winning judgment process and pre-stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer, and uses the jackpot type judgment table selected in step 075FS013 to hold the random number. A jackpot type and a jackpot pattern corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for judging the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer is determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbols and the second special symbols, the relationship between the jackpot types and the jackpot patterns is set so that the jackpot patterns are different for each jackpot type. Since the big win type and the big win pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence relationship between the big win pattern and the game control according to the big win class is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop pattern of the special patterns according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``3'' is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type, and when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a losing variation pattern. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. to decide.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
11-12 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y at step 075FS202), changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 11-13 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (step 075FS301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a pattern confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). When the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y at step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the RO 101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), Data indicating the release mode such as interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 5th rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step 075FS303 (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving frequency counter indicating the remaining fluctuation frequency of the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving frequency counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. At step 075FS311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N at step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the variable probability flag is set (Y at step 075FS313), the variable probability flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set at step 075FS313 (N at step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the processing of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening preprocessing)
FIGS. 11-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 11-14, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS402), a special winning hole open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined at step 075FS503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N at step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize slot or the V big prize slot is open (Y at step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N at step 075FS504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is ON (Y at step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when the V winning occurs. If the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N at step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y at step 075FS507), set the probability variation determination flag (step 075FS508), transmit the probability variation determination device passage specification command (step 075FS509), and move to the processing of step 075FS510 do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N at step 075FS510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 clears (sets to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIGS. 11-16 are flow charts showing an example of the process after the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11-16, in the process after opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process exit.

At step 075FS601, if the value of the counter for the number of openings is not 0 (N at step 075FS601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V open round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 and open the V big winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 11-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the jackpot ending process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot winning opening control timer to which the jackpot ending time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. At step 075FS704, if the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS704), the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability variation determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS705), 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Production processing during jackpot)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 11-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 11-18, during the big hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, a flag such as a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command is received is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot is won. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N at step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y at step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). In addition, according to the content of the process data set next, the control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the content of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5 . . In addition, it outputs a control signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/blinking/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continued according to the contents of the set process data. (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data described above based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main substrate 11 . For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big win, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect by controlling the effect device. Set data. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display part 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the big win, the effect during the round is executed by controlling the effect device as follows. To do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes the V probability variable suggesting effect suggesting whether or not the probability variable jackpot. set the process data of At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a command (A102 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R variable probability jackpot, process data for executing the V variable probability suggestive effect (see FIG. 11-41). set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the V notice for notifying that the next 4R is the V open round. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 11-42). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103 A big win round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V notice performance) corresponding to the specified big win round is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 11-43) to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot (A203 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round is set. Aim for the V effect is a guidance display using an image display regarding the V big prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the "Aim for V" effect, an image is displayed to urge the player to hit to the right so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V big winning opening, which is a specific area. In the "Aim for V" effect, an image pointing to the specific area of the V big prize opening itself may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening of the specific area may be displayed. , an image may be displayed that indicates the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when receiving a special winning opening open specifying command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, continues to aim at V and executes the effect (see FIG. 11-44). Set the process data for At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 4R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning mouth open designation command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 9R is the V opening round is performed. Set process data for execution. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108 (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (V notice performance in this case) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the designation command after opening the jackpot (A208 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 8R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance aiming at the V continuously when receiving a special winning opening open designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9R of the 10R probability variable jackpot. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and specifies the jackpot open designation command (A109 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 9R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the big hit round, the V winning effect is executed by the control of the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving a probability variable determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from CPU 103 during 4R of 5R probability variable jackpot, sets process data for executing V winning effect (see FIG. 11-44) .

The production control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning production when receiving the variable probability determination device passing designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R variable probability big hit.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the ending effect (FIGS. 11-46, 11) indicating the end of the jackpot game state -47)) to set the process data.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, thereby performing various effects. perform the production of

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 075F has the contents of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already explained, the following description will be given in particular to the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. In addition to displaying the image, in the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, lighting means such as LEDs are lit to prompt right hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of the 10R variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V, there is no possibility of winning V. Also, since V is not won, the effect of aiming for V is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpots are opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is not the normal big hit. After that, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V prize is generated, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 5th round after that, and the ending performance is executed when the 5th round is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, as in the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1R and 2R, and in the 2R, the V probability variable that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is the V release round is executed. In the 4th R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of the 10R variable probability big hit, the normal big prize winning opening is opened in the 1st to 7th R, and the V probability variable suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variable big hit is in the 7th R. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is changed to the variable probability state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled in the time-saving state. controlled by That is, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round is the low-probability-high base state, and in the case of the 5R-probability-variable big win or the 10R-probability-variable big win, the game state after the big win round is the high-probability-high base state.

Even in the variable probability state and the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time saving state after the big win round is finished.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also called consecutive chance win) occurs.

As described above, there is a 10R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot in the second special game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Since it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Concretely, as in the case of the first hit, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
11-19 to 11-21, the timing of main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. FIGS. 11-19 are timing charts showing an example of the process during the winning variation. FIGS. 11-20 are timing charts showing an example of processing during a big win. FIG. 11-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the big win. 11-19 to 11-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-19, at t1, when the first special game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a reserved storage number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command), display result designation command (8C system command), and variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

For example, the effect control CPU120, by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number designation command, or to update the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 to update. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the game state under control based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the symbol variation specifying command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Also, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win based on the display result designation command, and determines the decoration pattern accordingly. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designation command, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the content of the effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit occurs, at t3 after that, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right hand display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating a big win as fanfare effects, or outputs a sound congratulating a big win from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set the process data for In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image prompting right hitting, or outputs a sound prompting right hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right hitting promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, after that, when the big winning round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 1Rth round.

After that, when the 1R-th game ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2R-th game starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 2Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability variation suggestive effect (see FIG. 11-41) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A102 command).

After that, when the 2R-th game ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command).

After that, when the 3R-th game ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing inter-round effects between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 11-43) based on the designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on the special prize opening open designation command (A104 command), and then executes the aim for V effect (see FIG. 11-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when the V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIG. 11-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5Rth game starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5Rth round.

After that, when the 5R-th game ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a short working time state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the second special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

On the other hand, when the reserved storage number does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 11-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 11-60. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
11-22 are explanatory diagrams showing lighting modes of the lamps. In this embodiment, game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , The right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are turned off. Represented by

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each lit up, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B). represented in the form of

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are lit/blinking/lit in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 11-22(C).

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. FIGS. 11-23 to 11-33 and FIGS. 11-38 to 11-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the variation of the special symbols in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command) to the effect control CPU 120 ), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-23(b1) to 11-24(b3), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 11-23(b1) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-23(b1) to 11-24(b3) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (b2), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 and turns on the right hand display. Send a command (FD system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. 11-24 (c1) to FIG. 11-38 (d2), the effect control CPU 120 uses a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-24(c1) to 11-38(d2) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

Here, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into a plurality of production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The congratulatory part is a performance part in which a performance for congratulating the winning of a big win is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to congratulate the big win. The name display part is an effect part for notifying the player of the start of the big win round by announcing the name of the big win game state that has occurred, as well as informing the player of the type of the big win game state that has occurred. -24 (c2), (c3), as will be described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. The right-handed promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to hit right-handedly, and uses image display of characters and graphics as described later in FIGS. A large right-handed promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit right. The effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the big hit symbols are stopped and the symbols are determined, and then receives a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is performed until the normal big winning opening is opened and the big winning round is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-24(c1), an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") is displayed as a congratulatory part in the fanfare production to congratulate the jackpot. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5, the sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the big win. or In addition, as a right-handed promotion effect, an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (in this example, the characters "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5 to promote small right-handed hitting. A performance is performed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers and can display a predetermined image on each layer. As shown in FIG. 11-24(c1), the image made up of graphics and characters in the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!"). is displayed on the layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) than the character image of . In addition, in the fanfare effect, a sound that encourages right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed promotional effect, the right-handed display portion 075F030 and right-handed display portion 075F055 are lit in a manner that encourages right-handed hitting. (Lighting in this example). Note that the order of starting the above-described image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD-system command) after design determination, and lights up the right-handed display portion 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the received big hit start designation command (A0-series command), small right handed promotion performance The image display device 5 is caused to display an image consisting of graphics and characters in , and an image congratulating the winning of the jackpot. At this time, the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right hitting promotion performance located further to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display portion 075F030 and the right-handed display portion 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit are displayed in this order. An image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. is done until At that time, first, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display extinguishing designation command together with a background designating command after design determination, and turns off the right-handed display portion 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing designation command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion performance based on the received background designation command. When the process ends, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, a part of the name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS !!" "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, sounds corresponding to the start of the big win are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big win. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (c3), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. “BONUS!!” in the character image of “CHANCE BONUS!!” is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 . As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off once before the large right-handed promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare performance starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 11-24 (c4) to FIG. 11-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and a character (in this example, the character “right-handed”) ) in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 11-34 to 11-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the effect control CPU 120 emits guidance light to urge the player to hit to the right by moving the light emitting position of the frame lamp. In the present embodiment, the light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a light-emitting location. In another example, the light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness. A location may be called a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp positioned at the light emission location is not referred to as a light emission location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 11-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 11-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, left board lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the fanfare effect and the hard right hitting promotion effect are defined respectively. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a hard right hitting promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right hitting promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec long right hitting promotion effect twice. Become.

FIG. 11-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into the fanfare effect and the right-handed promotion effect, and is referenced in each time period. grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right hitting promotion effect, the grandchild table W11 common to both the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated. In addition, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, a grandchild table is not provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. As for the attacker lamp 9c, the 2000 msec, which is the execution time for the promotion effect of hitting to the right, is subdivided into a plurality of periods, and a plurality of grandchild tables are specified. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

11-36 and 11-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 11-36 shows the data in grandchild table W11 for Frame Right Lamp 075F009R and Frame Left Lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 11-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. , data for turning off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 11B are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In FIG. 11-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown in order to clearly show the lighting period. A dashed circle mark is attached to it.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T2 the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, and then at T3 the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit. The second lamp lights up, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first at T46, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T47 the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T48 the second lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, at T54, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. After all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are extinguished at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. , frame right lamp 075F009R up to the eighth lamp, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 shows the data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild table A11a-A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, of the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, left X (left X), middle X (middle X), right X (right X) Data are provided for each of the In FIG. 11-37, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000 ) are marked with dashed circles.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, at T3, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, then at T4, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then at T5, the movable body lamp is turned on. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first, at T48, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then at T49, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, and then at T50, the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. lights out. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. In addition, after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. (T57). Further, when compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain turned off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 storing the above data, as shown in FIGS. While the movable body lamp 9d is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. After that, at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. lights up, each lamp continues to light in seven colors thereafter, and at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out. lights out. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is illuminated in seven colors, starting from the left X lighting, then the middle X lamp, and the right X lamp, so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 also shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined over a very long time of 600000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on. Data of (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the attacker lamp 9c over 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once in 1350 msec, and thereafter repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until 1350 msec is completed, and performs a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of repeating color changes.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined over a very long time of 600000 msec for the lighting target of 320 msec. there is

When the large right-hand hitting promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then controls the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. is referenced multiple times to cause the attacker lamp 9c to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then the grandchild table A11c is referenced over the last 320 msec to turn off the attacker lamp 9c. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the frame lamps are illuminated in an arch from left to right, and soon the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right. becomes extinguished. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Also, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, where the light is turned off at the beginning, the color of the predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and the light is turned off after that, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c is turned on three times. Scenarios are divided into stages, and the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referred to for the repetition of the predetermined pattern color in the middle, so that there is no need to prepare data for the entire time from the beginning to the end of lighting for 2000 msec. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 11-25(c4), description will be given of the presentation mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 11-25(c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-25(c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27(c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29(c15), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c17), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c18), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c19), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c20), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c is also extinguished. Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R also stops. As a result, the first series of large right-handed promotion performances is completed.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c26), the second big right-handed promotion effect is started. At this time, as for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. It should be noted that, in the second hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion effect. Thereby, when the transition to the jackpot round is started after the big right-hand hitting promotion effect ends, the BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) during the big win round and the sound in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 (c27) to (c29), the game effect lamp 9 lights/flashes/extinguishes in the same manner as in the first big right hitting promotion effect in the second big right hitting promotion effect. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and graphics than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit right in a more emphatic manner than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, the player can be urged to hit the right hand in an easy-to-understand manner by executing the large right-hand hitting promotion effect during the fanfare effect.

In addition, in the first big right-handed promotion performance, a sound (for example, queuing sound effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, thereby effectively affecting the player. While it is possible to encourage hitting to the right, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-hand hitting promoting effect in the second big hitting to the right promotion effect, so that the BGM during the subsequent big win round. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion performance, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. The effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2). For example, the character images appear one by one in the big right hitting promotion effect, but all the character images appear at once in the name image of the big win game state. In addition, as for the size of the character image in the big right hitting promotion effect, the character image in the name image in the big win game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. Thus, after the name image of the big winning game state is displayed to inform the player of the big winning, the player can be informed of the right hitting by the big right hitting promoting performance with emphasis.

The attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and is aimed at when the game ball is shot. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the place to aim. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without flashing.

In the following example, an effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R variable probability jackpot, but the other effects are the same as the 5R variable probability jackpot. In addition, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning prize effect are not executed, but the other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished and the second round of the big right-handed promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c27), switching to the big hit round is performed. Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually lowered by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right shot!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. Incidentally, as described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 11-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-39(d3) to 11-40(e4) on the basis of the special prize opening open specification command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to 11-40 (e4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d3), the background image during the big win round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a kind of effect in image display called "transition". A "transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various methods in video editing such as wipe and overlap.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (also referred to as transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree (for example, 0%) that is lower than the first degree. % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, The next 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds is used to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not fade-in. Note that when changing the opacity (also referred to as opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above % values are reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

“Fade-out” is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second, The transparency (transmittance) is then gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparent, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. rate) is not faded out. In addition, when changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (c26) and (d1), the first layer transparency (transparency When the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%. The image is made transparent in stages to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-38(d2), the player sees only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is positioned deeper than the first layer of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering to , the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque to make it easy to see (fade-in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the big win round on the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen.

There is also a technique called "crossfade" as a transition. Cross-fading is, for example, fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. In terms of appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is displayed. is displayed once in the middle of switching from the image in the first period of the ED to the image in the second period of the ED.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed in the upper right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. Display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the background image switching display" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player cannot see the image. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player can see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect a little but cannot understand the meaning (promotion of right-handed hitting) indicated by the image. It means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning round is displayed. Furthermore, an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. In addition, BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. It should be noted that, as described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-hand hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the effect promoting small right hitting is displayed in the upper right ( arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e3), when the 1Rth is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e4), between the rounds, the big prize opening is usually kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An image (an arrow and a character) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 2Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-41(e5) to 11-42(e8) on the basis of the special winning opening open specification command (A102 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-41 (e5) to 11-42 (e8) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e6), during 2R, the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a text image of "PUSH!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the background image corresponding to the during-round effect. In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestive effect, the V A character image of "Success!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e8), when the 2nd round is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e9), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Succeeded!!” is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 3Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 11-42 (e10) to FIG. 11-43 (e12), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) to FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-42 (e10) to 11-43 (e12) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big winning opening is opened and the V announcement effect is executed. Specifically, a character image and a character image of "Grab the V in the next round!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5, together with the character image. A character image of "Catch the V in the next round!" is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from CPU103, the production control CPU 120 executes the production aiming at V between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), between rounds, the effect of aiming for V is executed while the big winning hole is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) to be aimed by the player by hitting to the right, is superimposed on the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning slot) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the "Aim for V" effect, it is possible to prompt the player to hit rightward so as to enter the game ball into the V big winning hole by using the image display related to the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4Rth based on the command from the CPU 104 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e14) to 11-44 (e15) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened, and the "Aim for V" effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim at the V big winning hole by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15), during the 4R, the "Aim for V" effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When a game ball enters the V big winning opening and a V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passing designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU120, the data of each effect of Figure 11-44 (e16) ~ Figure 11-45 (e18), set based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e16) to 11-45 (e18) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the mid-round effect is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the V winning has occurred. V" image is displayed, and an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V winning performance). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e17), when the 4th round is finished, the V big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize gate and the normal big prize gate remain closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, the image (arrow and character) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 5Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 11-45 (e19) to FIG. 11-46 (e21), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open designating command (A105 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-45 (e19) to 11-46 (e21) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e20), during the 5R, the round middle effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect continues to the upper right. (arrow and letter) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e21), when the 5th round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command after opening the big winning opening (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 for selecting the stage in the variable probability state after the big win game state. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f2), during the ending production, a name image indicating the name of the probability changing state along with the character image (in this example, the character image of “Yume Yume RUSH!!”) is displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in the center. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f3), during the ending effect, the addiction suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Beware of getting addicted. Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately." Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. It should be noted that, during the winning streak, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first win. Also in , such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f4), a forget-to-take prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to take a card such as a prepaid card or membership card related to the game. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the end of the ending effect, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.) are executed. 11-48 (g1) and (g2), the performance control CPU 120 stores the data of each performance in FIGS. (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g1), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.) are executed. 11-48 (g3) to FIG. 11-49 (g5), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 11-48 (g3) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g3) to 11-49 (g5) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g3), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g4), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the group announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the big hit variation. The group notice effect is that objects such as characters appear on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or all at once to make the visibility of the ready-to-win pattern difficult, and then the object disappears to show the specific pattern. It is a production that makes matching (for example, 777 etc.) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect ( arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot or the player cannot see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player's ability to see the image of the production, but the player cannot understand the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed play). It means that the player's visibility is given some influence. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is different from the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g6), as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit (10R probability variable big hit) occurs, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. Note that the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted because the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(h1), as a fanfare effect, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yah! Also, a sound congratulating a big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode for congratulating a big win. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(h2), after the fanfare effect is started, the image display device 5 displays a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" , a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins with the special figure 2 hit, since the big right hitting promotion effect has already been executed at the time of the special figure 1 win, the big right hitting promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further , the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 to 11-46, various effects such as V notice effect, aim for V effect, and V prize are executed during the round, and when the jackpot round ends soon. , ending effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 11-46 and 11-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-48, it is again controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state. In this series of games, on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed, and a right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern Each of the right-handed indicators 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without the occurrence of a jackpot and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 103 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting display part 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the parts 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player hits to the left again in the normal state.

[Aspect of performance of pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored]
FIG. 11-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovery from power failure during the fanfare effect due to winning one special figure. 11-51, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 11-51, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") for congratulating a big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. 11-24 (c2) state), a state in which only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-28 (c14)), and an arrow image in the large right-handed promotion performance together with the arrow image “Right-handed! !” is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, a character image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a large winning opening open designation command (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening open designation. Based on the command (A101 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 11-39(e1). In addition, an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!"), a name image indicating the name of the big win gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!"). character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed!"

In this way, even if power failure occurs before the large right-hand promotion effect is executed or until the large right-hand promotion effect is completed, the small right-hand promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right immediately after the power failure, and it is not possible to enter the game ball into the main prize hole if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player the disadvantage of

FIG. 11-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 11-52, as shown in FIG. 11-20, assume power interruption 2 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added starting from 0 points again, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. It should be noted that the point image is not limited to being displayed at 0pt after recovery from power failure, and the point may not be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??"

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 11-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the electricity is restored during the round after one round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-53 is the power interruption 3 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-53, when an image corresponding to an effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e4) in FIG. 11-40), when power failure occurs, After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-54, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-54, in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestive effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-41 (e7)), when power failure occurs, the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 11-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 11-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure between the rounds after two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-55 is the power interruption 5 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 2R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-55, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-42 (e9)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 11-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine in the case of recovery from power failure between rounds after 3 rounds of the big win at the time of winning 1 special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-56, the power interruption 6 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-56, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after the 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-43 (e13)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data about the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120, performance control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), executes the effect of aiming at V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14). It can also be configured as

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as being unable to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can.

FIG. 11-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the four rounds of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 11-57, as shown in FIG. 11-21, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 4R, and then power interruption 7 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-57, the state where the image corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-44 (e15)), or the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-44 (e16)), if the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the power is turned on to display "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 5R as shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption.

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done. Furthermore, as in 4R, when a power failure occurs while the V is aimed and the small right hitting promotion effect is being executed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where power is cut off while the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, both of them are common to each other, and after returning from the power failure, aim for V and the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, while the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed. is minimally performed. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least prompt the player to hit to the right immediately after recovery from the power failure in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 11-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure between the rounds after four rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-58 is the power interruption 8 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 4R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-58, when power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the final round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. 11-59, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-59, the state in which the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 11-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 11 -46 (e21)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it responds to the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1).

In this way, even if power is cut off during the final round of the big win, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that. It is possible to encourage hitting to the right and to prevent forgetting to hit to the right as much as possible.

FIG. 11-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the ending effect at the time of winning one special figure. 11-60, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 11-60, the state in which the image for selecting the stage in the probability changing state after the jackpot game state among the ending effects is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-46 (f1)), the character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the variable probability state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-47 (f2)), showing an image corresponding to the immersion suppression notification effect and the result of the game in the jackpot game state. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-47 (f3)), and a forget-to-take prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to take a card is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (the state of (f4) in FIG. 11-47), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to display the character image "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, if there is a reserved memory number, the effect control CPU 120 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command, C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command) from the CPU 103 , display result designation command (8C series command) and variation pattern designation command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, reserved storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background designation command (95 series command), pattern variation designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and variation pattern designation command (81 series command), Figure 11-48 (g1) The image display device 5 is caused to display a performance image corresponding to such a variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specified command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored while the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as the decorative pattern and the small pattern) is stopped. .

In this way, even if the power is cut off during the ending, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible, such as not being able to enter the second start winning port in a probability variable state after a big win game state due to forgetting to hit to the right. be able to.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the characterizing portion 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)), and the second guidance display. A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)),
After that, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
After that, while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13). The part where the image display corresponding to the production is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion production is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area becomes the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the second guidance display is continued while the third guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), aim for V While the image display corresponding to
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect during the display), and during the time the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)),
After that, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1), (d2 ), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect continues),
After that, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, FIG. 11-44 ( As shown in e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim for the V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect are continued),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16). While ending the image display corresponding to the aiming effect, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect during the display), and during the time the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)),
After that, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A101 command), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-38 As shown in (d1) and (d2), the portion where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect continues),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R is completed (for example, a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A104 command), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 11-44 (e15) As shown, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V and the image display corresponding to the effect of suggesting hitting a small right),
After that, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability variation determination device passage specification command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-44 As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is finished, while the image display corresponding to the "Short right hit suggesting effect" is continued),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect during the display), and during the time the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. It is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it, and then ending the large right-handed promotion performance while continuing the small right-handed promotion performance as it is. In addition, the effect of aiming for the V to aim at the V big prize mouth is executed from the time when the V big prize mouth is still closed, and by continuing as it is after the V big prize mouth is opened, the V To appeal to a player the importance of aiming at the big winning hole and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, after the V prize is generated and the V big prize opening is closed, the effect of aiming for the V is terminated, thereby preventing unnecessary promotion notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-described flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is instructed to always hit right-handed even after the V prize is generated from before the V big prize opening is opened. can be encouraged. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right. Also, when a power failure occurs during the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect and the power is restored from the power failure, it corresponds to the aim V effect. When the power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed and the power is restored, after the power is turned on, the character image of "Restoring ..." and the small Since the image of the right-handed promotion performance is displayed, the player can be urged to continue to right-handed in the subsequent game even if the power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process for executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect and image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (e1) to 11-46 (e21) The part where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is not performed during the round, but the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 11-48 and 11-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The second guide display is not affected by background image switching display (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out),
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5)). The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. To prevent a player from appealing to a player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it and continuing the small right-handed promotion performance while ending the large right-handed promotion performance during the subsequent big winning round. can be done. Further, the player can be urged to always hit to the right by continuously executing the small right-hand hitting promotion effect even in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after the end of the big win game state. Furthermore, after the occurrence of the big hit, the switching display (fade-out, fade-in, etc.) performed when switching to the big-hit round after the fanfare production is executed does not affect the small right-hand hitting promotion effect, and the big-hit game state is not affected. Since the small right-hand hitting promotion performance is not affected by the image display by the group notice performance performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after finishing, the player can always be urged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, the image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in tandem),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a certain way).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, the image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in tandem),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guidance means, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion effect The part that does not light up in a manner according to the condition).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, the image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light emission means (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamp is illuminated in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the display of the image corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 11-32 (c24), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2 hit, the speakers 8L and 8R will produce a large right-handed promotion effect part that does not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, the image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guiding means are
After turning off the light emitting means, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in Figs. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect part that does not light up in the mode).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. In addition, characters appear step by step, the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotional effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second right-handed promotion is output. As for the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. In addition, the sound is not output in conjunction with the promotion of the second and subsequent right strokes. In other words, the sound data for promoting the right-handed stroke includes only the sound data associated with the first right-handed promotion. Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion. Sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are interlocked with the first and second right-handed promotions based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. The sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of the third right stroke, and the sound is not output. In other words, the sound data for right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data associated with each of the first and second right-handed promotions. It should be noted that the sound data includes only sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice. . Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c3)). As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner according to the large right hitting promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, so that the player is urged to hit right in an easy-to-understand and effective manner. can be done.

(9) the light emitting means emits guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 11-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance light emission, and a child table (for example, , child tables shown in FIGS. 11-35) and corresponding grandchild tables (for example, child tables shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9 including the frame lamps refer to the parent table to specify the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, and refer to the child table to select the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Lighting/blinking/extinguishing is performed by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit guidance light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guiding means performs the guiding light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting locations of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 11-25 to 11- 33, the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, thereby executing a large right-handed promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guiding means emits the guiding light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-hand hitting promotion effect while lighting in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in relation to the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-38 (d1) 11-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-38(d1) to 11-39(d4), the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is switching of the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. It continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the jackpot round by switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue hitting to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 11 -49 (g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the small right hitting promotion effect influences the display in the notice effect suggesting that a big hit will occur in the probability variable state after the end of the big win advantageous state. continue without As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right hitting promotion effect will continue to be displayed without impeding visibility. The player can be urged to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2)). Thus, in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, a mode according to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the first hit. , and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the promotion of hitting to the right in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the light before the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (c3), after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. , not all lamps are turned off, and some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) that lights up first in the big right hitting promotion effect may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to show well the connection when the frame lamps are subsequently turned on in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-39 (d4), as a switching display during the big hit round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round, fade-in and fade-out Although the execution of the switching display of the background image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a presentation effect such as a white-out inserting a pure white screen or a blackout inserting a pitch-black screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round may be used.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be switched.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a mode selection screen for selecting the production mode may be displayed, and the background image may be switched to the mode corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In any case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big winning round, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the effect image in the probability variable state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probability changing state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the state of the jackpot game ball, the effect of inserting a pure white screen during the ready-to-win effect or the effect of inserting a black screen may be used. It may be possible to use the production effect of a pseudo continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or to make the decorative pattern difficult to see by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the production effect to make it do. In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the variable probability state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect should be unaffected.

(About aiming for V)
In this embodiment, as the specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified. As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V big prize opening itself, but to the vicinity of the V big prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V big prize winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V big winning opening located upstream of the V big winning opening.

(Regarding the promotion of hitting the right hand)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-25(c4) to 11-31(c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed!" However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character image "Right shot!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. may consist of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About favorable conditions)
In the present embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 11-24 (c1) to 11-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 11-20 to t16 in FIG. 11-21 ) was exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in FIGS. period until t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect may be executed during a period (symbol confirmation period) during which the symbol for the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit with one special figure, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. However, it is not limited to this. For example, according to the type of jackpot in one special figure, the mode of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be varied. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. is not output, and if the big hit in the special figure 1 is a variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion production. You may output a sound in a form. In addition, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. may not be output.

(Regarding right-handed promotion effects in the case of consecutive chan per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect.

In addition, according to the type of consecutive chan per special figure 2, the aspect of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the hit of the hit in the special figure 2 is a probability variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting the right side, and the speakers 8L, 8R to the promotion of hitting the right side. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, when the consecutive wins in the special figure 2 hits are normal jackpots, the frame lamps are not lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, and the loudspeakers 8L and 8R correspond to the large right-handed promotion performance. You can choose not to output sound with . If the consecutive chan per special figure 2 is a hit, unlike the first hit per special figure 1, there is a special mode (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ), or a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right hitting promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit with the special figure 1. .

(About the third guide display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, the image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round of the probability variable jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, display an image prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole, or display a variable winning ball. Displaying an image prompting the player to fire a game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sends from the CPU 103 a pending memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result Based on the receipt of the specified command (8C system command) and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command), along with the arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), "Aim! ” may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Even if such an image display is performed, the graphics and character images in the small right hitting promotion effect should be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each characteristic part and modification described above, for the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 075F007A always operate via the big hit state and small hit state However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device You may make it transfer to a time saving state (high base state), without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the time saving pattern described above, these time saving patterns may be part of the losing pattern or may be part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern or the big hit pattern. A lottery random number, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for judging a big win lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery, or the like may be used for the lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as winning of the time saving pattern.

In addition, when the time-saving design lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning design uses the time-saving design together, the variable display number of time-saving state (time-saving number of times) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area passes. to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when using a big hit pattern random number for lottery of time-saving patterns, it is specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Further, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement center is opened. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, in order to control the game state to the time saving state, it was always via the jackpot game state, so to encourage the player to hit right in the time saving state. It is possible to perform the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance during the fanfare performance executed when the big hit occurs. However, if the above-described losing pattern is used as a time saving pattern, the game state is controlled to a time saving state without going through the big hit game state. In the period from when the pattern is displayed to when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is necessary to secure time for executing the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance. Therefore, the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect may be executed by the method described below.

For example, if the pattern confirmation time until the fluctuation of the losing pattern that is not the time saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern fixing time until the losing pattern that is the time saving pattern stops is set to 30 seconds longer than that. During that time, a time saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of control of the time saving state. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 is different from the display result specification command indicating normal loss variation without time saving as a command for specifying loss, and time saving is given. A display result specifying command indicating is prepared, and depending on whether or not the time saving pattern is a loss variation, both commands may be used properly and an effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the pattern confirmation time to 0.5 seconds when a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation is received, and when a display result designation command indicating a loss variation for time saving is received, the symbol determination time. should be set to 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time saving state (for example, "time saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the design confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. Such a part of the time-saving fanfare effect can correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 11-24(c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1), before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by this time saving fanfare production is displayed, an image that congratulates the time saving state (for example, “O Happy!” character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, sounds congratulating the time saving state are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting congratulates the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to change the mode. In addition, as a small right hitting promotion effect, a small right hitting promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right hitting") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5, A right-handed hitting sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that prompts right-handed hitting. It should be noted that the image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 start and end at the same timing. That is, both are designed to encourage the player to hit right over the same period of time.

After that, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), while the name image (“time saving RUSH”) is displayed by the time saving fanfare production, the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously executed, and then FIG. 11-25 (c3) Once the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the same way as in the example shown in FIG. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. You may perform a performance. During this time, the small right hitting promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right hitting promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to the time saving state similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 11-48 to 11-50, and the small right hitting promotion effect may be continued.

In this way, even if it is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, by securing more pattern confirmation time than the pattern confirmation time in the lost pattern that is not the time saving pattern, the design confirmation time is large. A hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect can be executed.

In addition, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, as described above, not only those that execute the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect using the pattern fixed time as described above, but the loss of the time saving grant If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (fluctuation) of the game whose pattern has been confirmed, in the next game (fluctuation), the short-time fanfare production is executed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small right A hitting promotion effect may be executed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, instead of performing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a notice production, a time-saving fanfare production will be performed instead. Along with execution, a large right hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern is determined is a big win, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost pattern of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare production is executed with the pattern not changed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the CPU 103 does not transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in order to prevent the performance of the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and the time saving fanfare performance being hindered. . Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display devices 5C, 5L, 5R Decoration symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First start switch 22B Second start switch 23 Count switch 25A First reservation display 25B Second reservation display 25C Normal figure reservation display 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passage gates 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control for microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
104, 124 random number circuit 106 RTC
110 switch circuit 111 output circuit 123 display controller

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light ;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed ,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect that differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special aspect,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium in accordance with a player 's operation;
Guidance display means for performing guidance display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area using image display;
a guide light emitting means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot a game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means ;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
The first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed while the start effect relating to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and in the subsequent period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed. Display guidance,
Performing the second guide display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed ,
The guidance light emitting means emits the guidance light when executing the first guidance display after turning off the light emitting means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images